1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 22 #include <net/codel.h> 23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 24 #include <asm/unaligned.h> 25 26 /** 27 * DOC: Introduction 28 * 29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 32 * drivers. 33 */ 34 35 /** 36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 37 * 38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 43 * tasklet function. 44 * 45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 46 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 47 */ 48 49 /** 50 * DOC: Warning 51 * 52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 54 */ 55 56 /** 57 * DOC: Frame format 58 * 59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 62 * hardware. 63 * 64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 65 * 66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 68 * 69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 71 */ 72 73 /** 74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 75 * 76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 80 * 81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during 82 * suspend. 83 * 84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 85 * 86 */ 87 88 /** 89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 90 * 91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed 92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness 93 * between different stations/interfaces. 94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead 95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx(). 96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx(). 97 * 98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue 99 * driver operation. 100 * 101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 104 * 105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 107 * 108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a 109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a 110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op. 111 * 112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 116 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 117 * 118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 122 * .release_buffered_frames(). 123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 126 */ 127 128 struct device; 129 130 /** 131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 132 * 133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 135 */ 136 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 137 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 139 }; 140 141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 142 143 /** 144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 149 */ 150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 151 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 152 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 153 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 154 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 155 }; 156 157 /** 158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 159 * 160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 162 * 163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 165 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 172 */ 173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 174 u16 txop; 175 u16 cw_min; 176 u16 cw_max; 177 u8 aifs; 178 bool acm; 179 bool uapsd; 180 bool mu_edca; 181 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 182 }; 183 184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 185 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 186 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 187 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 188 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 189 }; 190 191 /** 192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 197 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed 199 */ 200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4), 206 }; 207 208 /** 209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 210 * 211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 213 * 214 * @def: the channel definition 215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 217 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 219 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 220 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 223 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 224 */ 225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 226 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 227 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 228 229 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 230 231 bool radar_enabled; 232 233 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 234 }; 235 236 /** 237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 239 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 240 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 242 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 243 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 244 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 245 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 246 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 247 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 248 * for changes/removal.) 249 */ 250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 251 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 253 }; 254 255 /** 256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 257 * 258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 261 * done. 262 * 263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 266 */ 267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 269 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 271 }; 272 273 /** 274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 275 * 276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback 277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed. 278 * 279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 280 * also implies a change in the AID. 281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 288 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 290 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 292 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 297 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 304 * changed 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 306 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 308 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 309 * context had been assigned. 310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 313 * keep alive) changed. 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 316 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 320 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 322 * status changed. 323 * 324 */ 325 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 326 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 327 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 328 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 329 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 330 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 331 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 332 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 333 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 334 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 335 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 336 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 337 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 338 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 339 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 340 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 341 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 342 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 343 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 344 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 345 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 346 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 347 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 348 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 349 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 350 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 351 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 352 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 353 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 354 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 355 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 356 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 357 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31, 358 359 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 360 }; 361 362 /* 363 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 364 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 365 * filtering will be disabled. 366 */ 367 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 368 369 /** 370 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 371 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 372 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 373 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 374 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 375 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 376 * once each time the timeout triggers. 377 */ 378 enum ieee80211_event_type { 379 RSSI_EVENT, 380 MLME_EVENT, 381 BAR_RX_EVENT, 382 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 383 }; 384 385 /** 386 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 387 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 388 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 389 */ 390 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 391 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 392 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 393 }; 394 395 /** 396 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 397 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 398 */ 399 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 400 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 401 }; 402 403 /** 404 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 405 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 406 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 407 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 408 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 409 */ 410 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 411 AUTH_EVENT, 412 ASSOC_EVENT, 413 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 414 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 415 }; 416 417 /** 418 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 419 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 420 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 421 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 422 */ 423 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 424 MLME_SUCCESS, 425 MLME_DENIED, 426 MLME_TIMEOUT, 427 }; 428 429 /** 430 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 431 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 432 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 433 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 434 */ 435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 436 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 437 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 438 u16 reason; 439 }; 440 441 /** 442 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 443 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 444 * @tid: the tid 445 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 446 */ 447 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 448 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 449 u16 tid; 450 u16 ssn; 451 }; 452 453 /** 454 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 455 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 456 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 457 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 458 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 459 * @u:union holding the fields above 460 */ 461 struct ieee80211_event { 462 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 463 union { 464 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 465 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 466 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 467 } u; 468 }; 469 470 /** 471 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 472 * 473 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 474 * 475 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 476 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 477 */ 478 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 479 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 480 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 481 }; 482 483 /** 484 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 485 * 486 * @lci: LCI subelement content 487 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 488 * @lci_len: LCI data length 489 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 490 */ 491 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 492 const u8 *lci; 493 const u8 *civicloc; 494 size_t lci_len; 495 size_t civicloc_len; 496 }; 497 498 /** 499 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 500 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 501 * 502 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 503 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 504 */ 505 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 506 u32 min_interval; 507 u32 max_interval; 508 }; 509 510 /** 511 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 512 * 513 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 514 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 515 * 516 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 517 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK 518 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 519 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either 520 * ACK, BACK or both 521 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 522 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 523 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 524 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 525 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 526 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 527 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 528 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 529 * @assoc: association status 530 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS 531 * or not 532 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 533 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 534 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 535 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 536 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 537 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 538 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 539 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 540 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 541 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 542 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 543 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 544 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 545 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 546 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 547 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 548 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 549 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 550 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 551 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 552 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 553 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 554 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 555 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 556 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 557 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 558 * the current band. 559 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 560 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 561 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 562 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 563 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be 564 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 565 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 566 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 567 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 568 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 569 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 570 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 571 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 572 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 573 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 574 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 575 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 576 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 577 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 578 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 579 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 580 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 581 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 582 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 583 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 584 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 585 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 586 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 587 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 588 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 589 * your driver/device needs to do. 590 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 591 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 592 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 593 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 594 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 595 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 596 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 597 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 598 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 599 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 600 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 601 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 602 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 603 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 604 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 605 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 606 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 607 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 608 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 609 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 610 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 611 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 612 * station. 613 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 614 * responder functionality. 615 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 616 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 617 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 618 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 619 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 620 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 621 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 622 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 623 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 624 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to 625 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 626 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 627 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 628 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 629 * interval. 630 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 631 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 632 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 633 */ 634 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 635 const u8 *bssid; 636 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 637 bool multi_sta_back_32bit; 638 bool uora_exists; 639 bool ack_enabled; 640 u8 uora_ocw_range; 641 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 642 bool he_support; 643 bool twt_requester; 644 bool twt_responder; 645 bool twt_protected; 646 /* association related data */ 647 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 648 bool ibss_creator; 649 u16 aid; 650 /* erp related data */ 651 bool use_cts_prot; 652 bool use_short_preamble; 653 bool use_short_slot; 654 bool enable_beacon; 655 u8 dtim_period; 656 u16 beacon_int; 657 u16 assoc_capability; 658 u64 sync_tsf; 659 u32 sync_device_ts; 660 u8 sync_dtim_count; 661 u32 basic_rates; 662 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 663 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 664 u16 ht_operation_mode; 665 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 666 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 667 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 668 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 669 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 670 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 671 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 672 int arp_addr_cnt; 673 bool qos; 674 bool idle; 675 bool ps; 676 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 677 size_t ssid_len; 678 bool hidden_ssid; 679 int txpower; 680 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 681 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 682 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 683 u16 max_idle_period; 684 bool protected_keep_alive; 685 bool ftm_responder; 686 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 687 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 688 bool nontransmitted; 689 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 690 u8 bssid_index; 691 u8 bssid_indicator; 692 bool ema_ap; 693 u8 profile_periodicity; 694 struct { 695 u32 params; 696 u16 nss_set; 697 } he_oper; 698 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 699 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 700 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 701 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 702 bool s1g; 703 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 704 }; 705 706 /** 707 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 708 * 709 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 710 * 711 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 712 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 713 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 714 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 715 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 716 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 717 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 718 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 719 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 720 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 721 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 722 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 723 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 724 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 725 * station 726 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 727 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 728 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 729 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 730 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 731 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 732 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 733 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 734 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 735 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 736 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 737 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 738 * hardware queue. 739 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 740 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 741 * is for the whole aggregation. 742 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 743 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 744 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 745 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 746 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 747 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 748 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 749 * off-channel operation. 750 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 751 * (header conversion) 752 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 753 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 754 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 755 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 756 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 757 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 758 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 759 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 760 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 761 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 762 * queue gets full. 763 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 764 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 765 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 766 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 767 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 768 * should kick the MLME state machine. 769 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 770 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 771 * status to user space) 772 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 773 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 774 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 775 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 776 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 777 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 778 * handled properly by the device. 779 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 780 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 781 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 782 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 783 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 784 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 785 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 786 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 787 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 788 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 789 * PS-Poll responses. 790 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 791 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 792 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 793 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 794 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 795 * monitor injection). 796 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 797 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 798 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 799 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 800 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 801 * 802 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 803 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 804 */ 805 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 806 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 807 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 808 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 809 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 810 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 811 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 812 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 813 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 814 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 815 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 816 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 817 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 818 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 819 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 820 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 821 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 822 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 823 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 824 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 825 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 826 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 827 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 828 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 829 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 830 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 831 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 832 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 833 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 834 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 835 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 836 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 837 }; 838 839 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 840 841 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 842 843 /** 844 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 845 * 846 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 847 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 848 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 849 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 850 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 851 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 852 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 853 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 854 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 855 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 856 * it can be sent out. 857 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 858 * has already been assigned to this frame. 859 * 860 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 861 */ 862 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 863 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 864 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 865 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 866 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 867 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 868 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 869 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 870 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 871 }; 872 873 /* 874 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 875 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 876 */ 877 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 878 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 879 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 880 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 881 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 882 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 883 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 884 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 885 886 /** 887 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 888 * Rate Control algorithm. 889 * 890 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 891 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 892 * 893 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 894 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 895 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 896 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 897 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 898 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 899 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 900 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 901 * Greenfield mode. 902 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 903 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 904 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 905 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 906 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 907 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 908 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 909 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 910 */ 911 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 912 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 913 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 914 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 915 916 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 917 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 918 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 919 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 920 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 921 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 922 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 923 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 924 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 925 }; 926 927 928 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 929 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 930 931 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 932 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 933 934 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 935 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 936 937 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 938 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 939 940 /** 941 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 942 * 943 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 944 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 945 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 946 * 947 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 948 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 949 * 950 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 951 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 952 * 953 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 954 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 955 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 956 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 957 * information:: 958 * 959 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 960 * 961 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 962 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 963 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 964 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 965 * information should then contain:: 966 * 967 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 968 * 969 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 970 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 971 */ 972 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 973 s8 idx; 974 u16 count:5, 975 flags:11; 976 } __packed; 977 978 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 979 980 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 981 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 982 { 983 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 984 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 985 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 986 } 987 988 static inline u8 989 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 990 { 991 return rate->idx & 0xF; 992 } 993 994 static inline u8 995 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 996 { 997 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 998 } 999 1000 /** 1001 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1002 * 1003 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1004 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1005 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1006 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1007 * 1008 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1009 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races) 1010 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1011 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally 1012 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1013 * @control: union part for control data 1014 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1015 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1016 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1017 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1018 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1019 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1020 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1021 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1022 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1023 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1024 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1025 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1026 * @pad: padding 1027 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1028 * @status: union part for status data 1029 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1030 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1031 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1032 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1033 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1034 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1035 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1036 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid 1037 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1038 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1039 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1040 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1041 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames. 1042 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1043 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames. 1044 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1045 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame 1046 */ 1047 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1048 /* common information */ 1049 u32 flags; 1050 u32 band:3, 1051 ack_frame_id:13, 1052 hw_queue:4, 1053 tx_time_est:10; 1054 /* 2 free bits */ 1055 1056 union { 1057 struct { 1058 union { 1059 /* rate control */ 1060 struct { 1061 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1062 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1063 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1064 u8 use_rts:1; 1065 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1066 u8 short_preamble:1; 1067 u8 skip_table:1; 1068 /* 2 bytes free */ 1069 }; 1070 /* only needed before rate control */ 1071 unsigned long jiffies; 1072 }; 1073 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1074 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1075 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1076 u32 flags; 1077 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1078 } control; 1079 struct { 1080 u64 cookie; 1081 } ack; 1082 struct { 1083 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1084 s32 ack_signal; 1085 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1086 u8 ampdu_len; 1087 u8 antenna; 1088 u16 tx_time; 1089 bool is_valid_ack_signal; 1090 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)]; 1091 } status; 1092 struct { 1093 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1094 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1095 u8 pad[4]; 1096 1097 void *rate_driver_data[ 1098 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1099 }; 1100 void *driver_data[ 1101 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1102 }; 1103 }; 1104 1105 static inline u16 1106 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1107 { 1108 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1109 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1110 */ 1111 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1112 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1113 } 1114 1115 static inline u16 1116 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1117 { 1118 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1119 } 1120 1121 /** 1122 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1123 * 1124 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1125 * @info: Basic tx status information 1126 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1127 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet 1128 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1129 */ 1130 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1131 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1132 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1133 struct sk_buff *skb; 1134 struct rate_info *rate; 1135 struct list_head *free_list; 1136 }; 1137 1138 /** 1139 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1140 * 1141 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1142 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1143 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1144 * 1145 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1146 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1147 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1148 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1149 */ 1150 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1151 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1152 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1153 const u8 *common_ies; 1154 size_t common_ie_len; 1155 }; 1156 1157 1158 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1159 { 1160 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1161 } 1162 1163 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1164 { 1165 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1166 } 1167 1168 /** 1169 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1170 * 1171 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1172 * 1173 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1174 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1175 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1176 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1177 * 1178 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use 1179 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data 1180 * instead if you need only the less space that allows. 1181 */ 1182 static inline void 1183 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1184 { 1185 int i; 1186 1187 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1188 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1189 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1190 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1191 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1192 /* clear the rate counts */ 1193 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1194 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1195 1196 BUILD_BUG_ON( 1197 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20); 1198 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0, 1199 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) - 1200 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len)); 1201 } 1202 1203 1204 /** 1205 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1206 * 1207 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1208 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1209 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1210 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1211 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1212 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1213 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1214 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1215 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1216 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1217 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1218 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1219 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1220 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1221 * de-duplication by itself. 1222 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1223 * the frame. 1224 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1225 * the frame. 1226 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1227 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1228 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1229 * merging. 1230 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1231 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1232 * (including FCS) was received. 1233 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1234 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1235 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1236 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1237 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1238 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1239 * each A-MPDU 1240 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1241 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1242 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1243 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1244 * on this subframe 1245 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC 1246 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field) 1247 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1248 * done by the hardware 1249 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1250 * processing it in any regular way. 1251 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1252 * them for sniffing purposes. 1253 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1254 * monitor interfaces. 1255 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1256 * them for sniffing purposes. 1257 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1258 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1259 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1260 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1261 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1262 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1263 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1264 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1265 * interleaved with other frames. 1266 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific 1267 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by 1268 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap. 1269 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1270 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1271 * the first subframe. 1272 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1273 * be done in the hardware. 1274 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1275 * frame 1276 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1277 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1278 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1279 * 1280 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1281 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1282 * - DATA3_CODING 1283 * - DATA5_GI 1284 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1285 * - DATA6_NSTS 1286 * - DATA3_STBC 1287 * 1288 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1289 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1290 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1291 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1292 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1293 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1294 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1295 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1296 */ 1297 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1298 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1299 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1300 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2), 1301 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1302 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1303 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1304 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1305 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7), 1306 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1307 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1308 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1309 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1310 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1311 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1312 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1313 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15), 1314 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16), 1315 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17), 1316 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1317 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1318 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20), 1319 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1320 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1321 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1322 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1323 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1324 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1325 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1326 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1327 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1328 }; 1329 1330 /** 1331 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1332 * 1333 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1334 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1335 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1336 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1337 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1338 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1339 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1340 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1341 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1342 */ 1343 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1344 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1345 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1346 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1347 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1348 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1349 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1350 }; 1351 1352 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1353 1354 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1355 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1356 RX_ENC_HT, 1357 RX_ENC_VHT, 1358 RX_ENC_HE, 1359 }; 1360 1361 /** 1362 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1363 * 1364 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1365 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1366 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1367 * 1368 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1369 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1370 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1371 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1372 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1373 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1374 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1375 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1376 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1377 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1378 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1379 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1380 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1381 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1382 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1383 * values were filled. 1384 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1385 * support dB or unspecified units) 1386 * @antenna: antenna used 1387 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1388 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1389 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only) 1390 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1391 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1392 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1393 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1394 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1395 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1396 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1397 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1398 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1399 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1400 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC 1401 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1402 */ 1403 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1404 u64 mactime; 1405 u64 boottime_ns; 1406 u32 device_timestamp; 1407 u32 ampdu_reference; 1408 u32 flag; 1409 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1410 u8 enc_flags; 1411 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3; 1412 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1; 1413 u8 rate_idx; 1414 u8 nss; 1415 u8 rx_flags; 1416 u8 band; 1417 u8 antenna; 1418 s8 signal; 1419 u8 chains; 1420 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1421 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc; 1422 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1423 }; 1424 1425 static inline u32 1426 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1427 { 1428 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1429 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1430 } 1431 1432 /** 1433 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information 1434 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace 1435 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more 1436 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that) 1437 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed 1438 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace 1439 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment) 1440 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1! 1441 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI 1442 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace 1443 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done 1444 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the 1445 * @data field. 1446 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that 1447 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd 1448 * length 1449 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data 1450 * 1451 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before 1452 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns 1453 * data. 1454 */ 1455 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap { 1456 u32 present; 1457 u8 align; 1458 u8 oui[3]; 1459 u8 subns; 1460 u8 pad; 1461 u16 len; 1462 u8 data[]; 1463 } __packed; 1464 1465 /** 1466 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1467 * 1468 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1469 * 1470 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1471 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1472 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1473 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1474 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1475 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1476 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1477 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1478 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1479 * for more. 1480 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1481 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1482 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1483 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1484 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1485 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1486 * operating channel. 1487 */ 1488 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1489 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1490 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1491 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1492 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1493 }; 1494 1495 1496 /** 1497 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1498 * 1499 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1500 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1501 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1502 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1503 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1504 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1505 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1506 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1507 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1508 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1509 */ 1510 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1511 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1512 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1513 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1514 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1515 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1516 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1517 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1518 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1519 }; 1520 1521 /** 1522 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1523 * 1524 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1525 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1526 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1527 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1528 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1529 */ 1530 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1531 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1532 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1533 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1534 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1535 1536 /* keep last */ 1537 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1538 }; 1539 1540 /** 1541 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1542 * 1543 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1544 * 1545 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1546 * 1547 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1548 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1549 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1550 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1551 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1552 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1553 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1554 * 1555 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1556 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1557 * 1558 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1559 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1560 * 1561 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1562 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1563 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1564 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1565 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1566 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1567 * 1568 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1569 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1570 * configured for an HT channel. 1571 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1572 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1573 */ 1574 struct ieee80211_conf { 1575 u32 flags; 1576 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1577 1578 u16 listen_interval; 1579 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1580 1581 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1582 1583 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1584 bool radar_enabled; 1585 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1586 }; 1587 1588 /** 1589 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1590 * 1591 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1592 * operation. 1593 * 1594 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1595 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1596 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1597 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1598 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1599 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1600 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1601 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1602 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1603 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1604 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1605 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1606 * channel, expressed in TU. 1607 */ 1608 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1609 u64 timestamp; 1610 u32 device_timestamp; 1611 bool block_tx; 1612 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1613 u8 count; 1614 u32 delay; 1615 }; 1616 1617 /** 1618 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1619 * 1620 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1621 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1622 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1623 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1624 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1625 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1626 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1627 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1628 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1629 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1630 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1631 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1632 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1633 */ 1634 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1635 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1636 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1637 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1638 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1639 }; 1640 1641 1642 /** 1643 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1644 * 1645 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1646 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1647 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1648 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1649 */ 1650 1651 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1652 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1653 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1654 }; 1655 1656 /** 1657 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1658 * 1659 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1660 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1661 * 1662 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1663 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1664 * or the BSS we're associated to 1665 * @addr: address of this interface 1666 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1667 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1668 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is 1669 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 1670 * for read access. 1671 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 1672 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1673 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 1674 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 1675 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 1676 * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 1677 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 1678 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 1679 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 1680 * restrictions. 1681 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 1682 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 1683 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 1684 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 1685 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 1686 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 1687 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 1688 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 1689 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 1690 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 1691 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 1692 * interface. 1693 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 1694 * for this interface. 1695 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1696 * sizeof(void \*). 1697 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction) 1698 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped, 1699 * protected by fq->lock. 1700 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 1701 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 1702 */ 1703 struct ieee80211_vif { 1704 enum nl80211_iftype type; 1705 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 1706 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1707 bool p2p; 1708 bool csa_active; 1709 bool mu_mimo_owner; 1710 1711 u8 cab_queue; 1712 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1713 1714 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 1715 1716 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 1717 1718 u32 driver_flags; 1719 u32 offload_flags; 1720 1721 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 1722 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 1723 #endif 1724 1725 bool probe_req_reg; 1726 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 1727 1728 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1729 1730 /* must be last */ 1731 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 1732 }; 1733 1734 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1735 { 1736 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 1737 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 1738 #endif 1739 return false; 1740 } 1741 1742 /** 1743 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 1744 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 1745 * 1746 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1747 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 1748 * 1749 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1750 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1751 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1752 */ 1753 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 1754 1755 /** 1756 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 1757 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 1758 * 1759 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1760 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 1761 * 1762 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1763 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1764 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1765 */ 1766 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 1767 1768 /** 1769 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 1770 * 1771 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 1772 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 1773 * 1774 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 1775 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 1776 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 1777 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 1778 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 1779 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 1780 * generation in software. 1781 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 1782 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 1783 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 1784 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 1785 * (MFP) to be done in software. 1786 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 1787 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 1788 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 1789 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 1790 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 1791 * MIC. 1792 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 1793 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 1794 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 1795 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 1796 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 1797 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 1798 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 1799 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 1800 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 1801 * only for management frames (MFP). 1802 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 1803 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 1804 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 1805 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 1806 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 1807 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 1808 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 1809 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 1810 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number 1811 * generation only 1812 */ 1813 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 1814 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 1815 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 1816 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 1817 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 1818 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 1819 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 1820 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 1821 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 1822 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 1823 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 1824 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 1825 }; 1826 1827 /** 1828 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 1829 * 1830 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 1831 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 1832 * 1833 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 1834 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 1835 * encrypted in hardware. 1836 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 1837 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 1838 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 1839 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 1840 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 1841 * @keylen: key material length 1842 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 1843 * data block: 1844 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 1845 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 1846 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 1847 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 1848 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 1849 */ 1850 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 1851 atomic64_t tx_pn; 1852 u32 cipher; 1853 u8 icv_len; 1854 u8 iv_len; 1855 u8 hw_key_idx; 1856 s8 keyidx; 1857 u16 flags; 1858 u8 keylen; 1859 u8 key[]; 1860 }; 1861 1862 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 1863 1864 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 1865 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 1866 1867 /** 1868 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 1869 * 1870 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 1871 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1872 * reverse order than in packet) 1873 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1874 * reverse order than in packet) 1875 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1876 * reverse order than in packet) 1877 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1878 * reverse order than in packet) 1879 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 1880 */ 1881 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 1882 union { 1883 struct { 1884 u32 iv32; 1885 u16 iv16; 1886 } tkip; 1887 struct { 1888 u8 pn[6]; 1889 } ccmp; 1890 struct { 1891 u8 pn[6]; 1892 } aes_cmac; 1893 struct { 1894 u8 pn[6]; 1895 } aes_gmac; 1896 struct { 1897 u8 pn[6]; 1898 } gcmp; 1899 struct { 1900 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 1901 u8 seq_len; 1902 } hw; 1903 }; 1904 }; 1905 1906 /** 1907 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme 1908 * 1909 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining 1910 * the secure packet crypto handling. 1911 * 1912 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector 1913 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage 1914 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher 1915 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header 1916 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header 1917 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header 1918 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits 1919 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx 1920 * key_idx value calculation: 1921 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift 1922 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes 1923 */ 1924 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme { 1925 u32 cipher; 1926 u16 iftype; 1927 u8 hdr_len; 1928 u8 pn_len; 1929 u8 pn_off; 1930 u8 key_idx_off; 1931 u8 key_idx_mask; 1932 u8 key_idx_shift; 1933 u8 mic_len; 1934 }; 1935 1936 /** 1937 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 1938 * 1939 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 1940 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 1941 * 1942 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 1943 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 1944 */ 1945 enum set_key_cmd { 1946 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 1947 }; 1948 1949 /** 1950 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 1951 * 1952 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 1953 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 1954 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 1955 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 1956 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 1957 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 1958 */ 1959 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 1960 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 1961 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 1962 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 1963 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 1964 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 1965 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 1966 }; 1967 1968 /** 1969 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 1970 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 1971 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 1972 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 1973 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 1974 * (including 80+80 MHz) 1975 * 1976 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 1977 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 1978 */ 1979 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 1980 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 1981 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 1982 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 1983 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 1984 }; 1985 1986 /** 1987 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 1988 * 1989 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 1990 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 1991 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 1992 */ 1993 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 1994 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 1995 struct { 1996 s8 idx; 1997 u8 count; 1998 u8 count_cts; 1999 u8 count_rts; 2000 u16 flags; 2001 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2002 }; 2003 2004 /** 2005 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2006 * 2007 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2008 * 2009 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2010 * to the STA. 2011 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2012 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2013 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2014 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2015 * per peer TPC. 2016 */ 2017 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2018 s16 power; 2019 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2020 }; 2021 2022 /** 2023 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2024 * 2025 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2026 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2027 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2028 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2029 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2030 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2031 * 2032 * @addr: MAC address 2033 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2034 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band) 2035 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2036 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2037 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2038 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2039 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2040 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2041 * Can be modified by driver. 2042 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2043 * otherwise always false) 2044 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2045 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2046 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2047 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2048 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2049 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2050 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2051 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2052 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2053 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2054 * the station moves to associated state. 2055 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2056 * @rates: rate control selection table 2057 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2058 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2059 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2060 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2061 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2062 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2063 * unlimited. 2064 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2065 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2066 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2067 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2068 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that 2069 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames 2070 */ 2071 struct ieee80211_sta { 2072 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2073 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2074 u16 aid; 2075 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2076 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2077 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2078 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2079 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2080 bool wme; 2081 u8 uapsd_queues; 2082 u8 max_sp; 2083 u8 rx_nss; 2084 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2085 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2086 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2087 bool tdls; 2088 bool tdls_initiator; 2089 bool mfp; 2090 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2091 2092 /** 2093 * @max_amsdu_len: 2094 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2095 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2096 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2097 * 2098 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2099 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2100 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2101 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2102 * 2103 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2104 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2105 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2106 */ 2107 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2108 bool support_p2p_ps; 2109 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2110 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2111 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2112 2113 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2114 2115 /* must be last */ 2116 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2117 }; 2118 2119 /** 2120 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2121 * 2122 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2123 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2124 * 2125 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2126 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2127 */ 2128 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2129 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2130 }; 2131 2132 /** 2133 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2134 * 2135 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2136 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2137 */ 2138 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2139 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2140 }; 2141 2142 /** 2143 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2144 * 2145 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2146 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2147 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2148 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2149 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2150 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2151 * 2152 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2153 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2154 */ 2155 struct ieee80211_txq { 2156 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2157 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2158 u8 tid; 2159 u8 ac; 2160 2161 /* must be last */ 2162 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2163 }; 2164 2165 /** 2166 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2167 * 2168 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2169 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2170 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2171 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2172 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2173 * 2174 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2175 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2176 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2177 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2178 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2179 * algorithm. 2180 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2181 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2182 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2183 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2184 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2185 * CCK frames. 2186 * 2187 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2188 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2189 * the FCS at the end. 2190 * 2191 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2192 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2193 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2194 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2195 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2196 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2197 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2198 * 2199 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2200 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2201 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2202 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2203 * 2204 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2205 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2206 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2207 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2208 * 2209 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2210 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2211 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2212 * 2213 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2214 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2215 * 2216 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2217 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2218 * 2219 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2220 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2221 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2222 * 2223 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2224 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2225 * 2226 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2227 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2228 * 2229 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2230 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2231 * the stack. 2232 * 2233 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2234 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2235 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2236 * 2237 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2238 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2239 * dtim_period). 2240 * 2241 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2242 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2243 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2244 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2245 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2246 * only in that case. 2247 * 2248 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2249 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2250 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2251 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2252 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2253 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2254 * 2255 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2256 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2257 * software. 2258 * 2259 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2260 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2261 * active interfaces. 2262 * 2263 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2264 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2265 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2266 * 2267 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2268 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2269 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2270 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2271 * supported cipher suites. 2272 * 2273 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2274 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2275 * for frames. 2276 * 2277 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2278 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2279 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2280 * control for more details. 2281 * 2282 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2283 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2284 * 2285 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2286 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2287 * is supported. 2288 * 2289 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2290 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2291 * 2292 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2293 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2294 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2295 * 2296 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2297 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2298 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2299 * CSA frame. 2300 * 2301 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2302 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2303 * 2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2305 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2306 * 2307 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2308 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2309 * 2310 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2311 * within A-MPDU. 2312 * 2313 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2314 * for sent beacons. 2315 * 2316 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2317 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2318 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2319 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2320 * 2321 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2322 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2323 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2324 * timeout. 2325 * 2326 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2327 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2328 * 2329 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2330 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2331 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2332 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2333 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2334 * 2335 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2336 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2337 * 2338 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2339 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2340 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2341 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2342 * 2343 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2344 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2345 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2346 * 2347 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2348 * TDLS links. 2349 * 2350 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the 2351 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a 2352 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no 2353 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the 2354 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of 2355 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the 2356 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted. 2357 * 2358 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2359 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2360 * 2361 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2362 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2363 * 2364 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2365 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2366 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2367 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2368 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2369 * 2370 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2371 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2372 * TXQs to start with. 2373 * 2374 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2375 * length in tx status information 2376 * 2377 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2378 * 2379 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2380 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2381 * 2382 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2383 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2384 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2385 * 2386 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2387 * offload 2388 * 2389 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2390 */ 2391 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2392 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2393 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2394 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2395 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2396 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2397 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2398 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2399 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2400 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2401 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2402 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2403 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2404 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2405 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2406 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2407 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2408 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2409 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2410 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2411 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2412 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2413 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2414 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2415 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2416 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2417 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2418 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2419 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2420 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2421 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2422 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2423 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2424 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2425 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2426 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2427 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2428 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2429 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2430 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2431 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2432 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, 2433 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2434 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2435 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2436 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2437 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2438 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2439 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2440 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2441 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2442 2443 /* keep last, obviously */ 2444 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2445 }; 2446 2447 /** 2448 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2449 * 2450 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2451 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2452 * 2453 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2454 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2455 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2456 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2457 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2458 * 2459 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2460 * 2461 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2462 * along with this structure. 2463 * 2464 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2465 * 2466 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2467 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2468 * 2469 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2470 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2471 * 2472 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2473 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2474 * 2475 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2476 * that HW supports 2477 * 2478 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2479 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2480 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2481 * 2482 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2483 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2484 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2485 * 2486 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2487 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2488 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2489 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2490 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2491 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2492 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2493 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2494 * 2495 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2496 * can handle. 2497 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2498 * the hw can report back. 2499 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2500 * 2501 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2502 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2503 * aggregation. 2504 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2505 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2506 * it shouldn't be set. 2507 * 2508 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2509 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2510 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2511 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2512 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2513 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2514 * 2515 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2516 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2517 * 2518 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2519 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2520 * 2521 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2522 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2523 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2524 * adding _BW is supported today. 2525 * 2526 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2527 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2528 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2529 * 2530 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags 2531 * 2532 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2533 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2534 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2535 * device_timestamp. 2536 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 2537 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 2538 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 2539 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 2540 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 2541 * 2542 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 2543 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 2544 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 2545 * 2546 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 2547 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 2548 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 2549 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 2550 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 2551 * neither enabled. 2552 * 2553 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 2554 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 2555 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 2556 * 2557 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions. 2558 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions 2559 * supported by HW. 2560 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 2561 * device. 2562 * 2563 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 2564 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 2565 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 2566 * 2567 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 2568 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 2569 * 2570 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 2571 */ 2572 struct ieee80211_hw { 2573 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 2574 struct wiphy *wiphy; 2575 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 2576 void *priv; 2577 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 2578 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 2579 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 2580 int vif_data_size; 2581 int sta_data_size; 2582 int chanctx_data_size; 2583 int txq_data_size; 2584 u16 queues; 2585 u16 max_listen_interval; 2586 s8 max_signal; 2587 u8 max_rates; 2588 u8 max_report_rates; 2589 u8 max_rate_tries; 2590 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2591 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 2592 u8 max_tx_fragments; 2593 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 2594 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 2595 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 2596 struct { 2597 int units_pos; 2598 s16 accuracy; 2599 } radiotap_timestamp; 2600 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2601 u8 uapsd_queues; 2602 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 2603 u8 n_cipher_schemes; 2604 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes; 2605 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 2606 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 2607 u8 weight_multiplier; 2608 u32 max_mtu; 2609 }; 2610 2611 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2612 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2613 { 2614 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2615 } 2616 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2617 2618 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2619 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2620 { 2621 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2622 } 2623 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2624 2625 /** 2626 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 2627 * 2628 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 2629 * @req: cfg80211 request. 2630 */ 2631 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 2632 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 2633 2634 /* Keep last */ 2635 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 2636 }; 2637 2638 /** 2639 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 2640 * 2641 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 2642 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 2643 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 2644 * @status: channel-switch response status 2645 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 2646 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2647 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2648 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 2649 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 2650 */ 2651 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 2652 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2653 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 2654 u8 action_code; 2655 u32 status; 2656 u32 timestamp; 2657 u16 switch_time; 2658 u16 switch_timeout; 2659 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 2660 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 2661 }; 2662 2663 /** 2664 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 2665 * 2666 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 2667 * 2668 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 2669 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 2670 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 2671 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 2672 * is already used internally by mac80211. 2673 * 2674 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 2675 */ 2676 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 2677 2678 /** 2679 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 2680 * 2681 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 2682 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 2683 */ 2684 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 2685 { 2686 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 2687 } 2688 2689 /** 2690 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 2691 * 2692 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 2693 * @addr: the address to set 2694 */ 2695 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 2696 { 2697 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 2698 } 2699 2700 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2701 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2702 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2703 { 2704 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 2705 return NULL; 2706 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 2707 } 2708 2709 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2710 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2711 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2712 { 2713 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 2714 return NULL; 2715 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 2716 } 2717 2718 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2719 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2720 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 2721 { 2722 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 2723 return NULL; 2724 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 2725 } 2726 2727 /** 2728 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 2729 * @hw: the hardware 2730 * @skb: the skb 2731 * 2732 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 2733 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 2734 */ 2735 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 2736 2737 /** 2738 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 2739 * 2740 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 2741 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 2742 * 2743 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 2744 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 2745 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 2746 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 2747 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 2748 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 2749 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 2750 * 2751 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 2752 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 2753 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 2754 * 2755 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 2756 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 2757 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 2758 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range. 2759 * 2760 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 2761 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 2762 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 2763 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 2764 * 2765 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 2766 * 2767 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 2768 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any 2769 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 2770 * based on the receive flags. 2771 * 2772 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 2773 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 2774 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 2775 * keys. 2776 * 2777 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 2778 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 2779 * handler. 2780 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 2781 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 2782 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 2783 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 2784 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 2785 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 2786 * 2787 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 2788 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 2789 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 2790 * 2791 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 2792 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 2793 * requirements: 2794 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to 2795 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been 2796 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key, 2797 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 2798 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 2799 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 2800 encrypted with the new key and 2801 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 2802 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 2803 */ 2804 2805 /** 2806 * DOC: Powersave support 2807 * 2808 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 2809 * 2810 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself, 2811 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 2812 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 2813 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 2814 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 2815 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 2816 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 2817 * it finds traffic directed to it. 2818 * 2819 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 2820 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 2821 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 2822 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 2823 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 2824 * 2825 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 2826 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 2827 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 2828 * 2829 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 2830 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 2831 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 2832 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 2833 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 2834 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 2835 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that. 2836 * 2837 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 2838 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 2839 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 2840 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when 2841 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 2842 * periods. 2843 * 2844 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 2845 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 2846 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 2847 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 2848 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 2849 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 2850 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 2851 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 2852 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 2853 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 2854 * 2855 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 2856 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 2857 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 2858 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 2859 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 2860 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 2861 * 2862 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 2863 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 2864 */ 2865 2866 /** 2867 * DOC: Beacon filter support 2868 * 2869 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 2870 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 2871 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 2872 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 2873 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 2874 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 2875 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 2876 * 2877 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 2878 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 2879 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 2880 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 2881 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 2882 * 2883 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 2884 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 2885 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 2886 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 2887 * 2888 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 2889 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 2890 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 2891 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 2892 * 2893 * - a list of information element IDs 2894 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 2895 * 2896 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 2897 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 2898 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 2899 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 2900 * vendor information elements. 2901 * 2902 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 2903 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 2904 * 2905 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing 2906 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 2907 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 2908 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 2909 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 2910 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 2911 * 2912 * 2913 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 2914 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 2915 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 2916 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when 2917 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 2918 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 2919 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 2920 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 2921 * 2922 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 2923 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 2924 * signal strength threshold checking. 2925 */ 2926 2927 /** 2928 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 2929 * 2930 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 2931 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 2932 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 2933 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 2934 * 2935 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 2936 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 2937 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 2938 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 2939 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 2940 * hardware flags. 2941 * 2942 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 2943 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 2944 * turned off otherwise. 2945 * 2946 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 2947 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 2948 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 2949 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 2950 */ 2951 2952 /** 2953 * DOC: Frame filtering 2954 * 2955 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 2956 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 2957 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 2958 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 2959 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 2960 * 2961 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 2962 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 2963 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 2964 * 2965 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 2966 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 2967 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 2968 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 2969 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 2970 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 2971 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 2972 * 2973 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 2974 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 2975 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 2976 * or dropped. 2977 * 2978 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 2979 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 2980 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 2981 * the flag, but not clear it. 2982 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 2983 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 2984 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 2985 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 2986 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 2987 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 2988 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 2989 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 2990 */ 2991 2992 /** 2993 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 2994 * 2995 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 2996 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 2997 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 2998 * 2999 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3000 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3001 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3002 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3003 * the driver code. 3004 * 3005 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3006 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3007 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3008 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3009 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3010 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3011 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3012 * 3013 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3014 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3015 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3016 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3017 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3018 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3019 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3020 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3021 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3022 * @sta_notify callback. 3023 * 3024 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3025 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3026 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3027 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3028 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3029 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3030 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3031 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3032 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3033 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3034 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3035 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3036 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3037 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3038 * 3039 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3040 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3041 * 3042 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3043 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3044 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3045 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3046 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3047 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3048 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3049 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3050 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3051 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3052 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3053 * 3054 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3055 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3056 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3057 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3058 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3059 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3060 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3061 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3062 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3063 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames, 3064 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3065 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3066 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3067 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3068 * 3069 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3070 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3071 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3072 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3073 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3074 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3075 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3076 * 3077 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3078 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3079 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3080 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3081 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3082 * 3083 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3084 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3085 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3086 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3087 */ 3088 3089 /** 3090 * DOC: HW queue control 3091 * 3092 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3093 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3094 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3095 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3096 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3097 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3098 * 3099 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3100 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3101 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3102 * 3103 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3104 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3105 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3106 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3107 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3108 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3109 * the hardware queue. 3110 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3111 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3112 * 3113 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual 3114 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3115 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3116 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3117 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3118 * 3119 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3120 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3121 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3122 * off-channel queue: 9 3123 * 3124 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3125 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3126 * 3127 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3128 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3129 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3130 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3131 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3132 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3133 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3134 * 3135 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3136 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3137 * 3138 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3139 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3140 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3141 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3142 */ 3143 3144 /** 3145 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3146 * 3147 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3148 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3149 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3150 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3151 * 3152 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3153 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3154 * multicast address. 3155 * 3156 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3157 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3158 * 3159 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3160 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3161 * 3162 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3163 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3164 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3165 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3166 * honour this flag if possible. 3167 * 3168 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3169 * station 3170 * 3171 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3172 * 3173 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3174 * 3175 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3176 * 3177 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3178 */ 3179 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3180 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3181 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3182 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3183 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3184 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3185 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3186 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3187 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3188 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3189 }; 3190 3191 /** 3192 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3193 * 3194 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3195 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3196 * 3197 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3198 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3199 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3200 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3201 * 3202 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3203 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3204 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3205 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3206 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3207 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3208 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3209 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3210 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3211 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3212 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3213 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3214 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3215 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3216 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3217 * session is gone and removes the station. 3218 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3219 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3220 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3221 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3222 */ 3223 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3224 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3225 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3226 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3227 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3228 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3229 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3230 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3231 }; 3232 3233 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3234 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3235 3236 /** 3237 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3238 * 3239 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3240 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3241 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3242 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3243 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3244 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3245 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3246 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3247 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3248 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3249 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3250 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3251 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3252 */ 3253 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3254 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3255 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3256 u16 tid; 3257 u16 ssn; 3258 u16 buf_size; 3259 bool amsdu; 3260 u16 timeout; 3261 }; 3262 3263 /** 3264 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3265 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3266 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3267 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3268 */ 3269 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3270 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3271 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3272 }; 3273 3274 /** 3275 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3276 * 3277 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3278 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3279 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3280 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3281 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3282 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3283 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3284 * the peer. 3285 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3286 * by the peer 3287 */ 3288 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3289 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3290 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3291 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3292 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3293 }; 3294 3295 /** 3296 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3297 * 3298 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3299 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3300 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3301 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3302 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3303 * 3304 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3305 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3306 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3307 */ 3308 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3309 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3310 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3311 }; 3312 3313 /** 3314 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type 3315 * 3316 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3317 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3318 * 3319 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3320 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3321 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3322 * of wowlan configuration) 3323 */ 3324 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3325 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3326 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3327 }; 3328 3329 /** 3330 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3331 * 3332 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3333 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3334 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3335 * 3336 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3337 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3338 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3339 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3340 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3341 * Must be atomic. 3342 * 3343 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3344 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3345 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3346 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3347 * or zero. 3348 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3349 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3350 * is added. 3351 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3352 * 3353 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3354 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3355 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3356 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3357 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3358 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3359 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3360 * 3361 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3362 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3363 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3364 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3365 * reconfigured at resume time. 3366 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3367 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3368 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3369 * must return 1 from this function. 3370 * 3371 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3372 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3373 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3374 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3375 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3376 * 3377 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3378 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3379 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3380 * in suspend(). 3381 * 3382 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3383 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3384 * and @stop must be implemented. 3385 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3386 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3387 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3388 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3389 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3390 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3391 * 3392 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3393 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3394 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3395 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3396 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3397 * 3398 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3399 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3400 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3401 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3402 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3403 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3404 * MAC address of the device going away. 3405 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3406 * 3407 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3408 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3409 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3410 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3411 * 3412 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3413 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3414 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3415 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3416 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3417 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3418 * can sleep. 3419 * 3420 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3421 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3422 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3423 * 3424 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3425 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3426 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3427 * 3428 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3429 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3430 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3431 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3432 * which flags are changed. 3433 * This callback can sleep. 3434 * 3435 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3436 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3437 * 3438 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3439 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3440 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3441 * is enabled. 3442 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3443 * The callback can sleep. 3444 * 3445 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3446 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3447 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3448 * The callback must be atomic. 3449 * 3450 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3451 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3452 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3453 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3454 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3455 * 3456 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3457 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3458 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3459 * 3460 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3461 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3462 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3463 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3464 * that power save is disabled. 3465 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3466 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3467 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3468 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3469 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3470 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3471 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3472 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3473 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3474 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3475 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3476 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3477 * The callback can sleep. 3478 * 3479 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3480 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3481 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3482 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3483 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 3484 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 3485 * The callback can sleep. 3486 * 3487 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 3488 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 3489 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 3490 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 3491 * 3492 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 3493 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 3494 * 3495 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 3496 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 3497 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 3498 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 3499 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 3500 * 3501 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 3502 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 3503 * this notification. 3504 * The callback can sleep. 3505 * 3506 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 3507 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 3508 * The callback can sleep. 3509 * 3510 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 3511 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 3512 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 3513 * The callback must be atomic. 3514 * 3515 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 3516 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 3517 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 3518 * should be set as well. 3519 * The callback can sleep. 3520 * 3521 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 3522 * The callback can sleep. 3523 * 3524 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 3525 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 3526 * 3527 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 3528 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 3529 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 3530 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 3531 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3532 * This callback can sleep. 3533 * 3534 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3535 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 3536 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3537 * callback can sleep. 3538 * 3539 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 3540 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 3541 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 3542 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 3543 * 3544 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 3545 * power for the station. 3546 * This callback can sleep. 3547 * 3548 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 3549 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 3550 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 3551 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 3552 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 3553 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 3554 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 3555 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3556 * The callback can sleep. 3557 * 3558 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 3559 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 3560 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 3561 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 3562 * in @sta_state. 3563 * The callback can sleep. 3564 * 3565 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be 3566 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 3567 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 3568 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 3569 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 3570 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 3571 * Must be atomic. 3572 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 3573 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 3574 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 3575 * 3576 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 3577 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 3578 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 3579 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 3580 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 3581 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 3582 * The callback can sleep. 3583 * 3584 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 3585 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 3586 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 3587 * The callback can sleep. 3588 * 3589 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 3590 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 3591 * required function. 3592 * The callback can sleep. 3593 * 3594 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 3595 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 3596 * required function. 3597 * The callback can sleep. 3598 * 3599 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 3600 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 3601 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 3602 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 3603 * The callback can sleep. 3604 * 3605 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 3606 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 3607 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 3608 * TSF synchronization. 3609 * The callback can sleep. 3610 * 3611 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 3612 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 3613 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 3614 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 3615 * The callback can sleep. 3616 * 3617 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 3618 * 3619 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 3620 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 3621 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 3622 * The callback can sleep. 3623 * 3624 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 3625 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 3626 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 3627 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 3628 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 3629 * 3630 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 3631 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 3632 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 3633 * 3634 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 3635 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 3636 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 3637 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 3638 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 3639 * Note that vif can be NULL. 3640 * The callback can sleep. 3641 * 3642 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 3643 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 3644 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 3645 * completion of the channel switch. 3646 * 3647 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 3648 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 3649 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 3650 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 3651 * 3652 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 3653 * 3654 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 3655 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 3656 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 3657 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 3658 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 3659 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 3660 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 3661 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 3662 * must be accepted in this case. 3663 * This callback may sleep. 3664 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 3665 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 3666 * 3667 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 3668 * 3669 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 3670 * 3671 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 3672 * queues before entering power save. 3673 * 3674 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 3675 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 3676 * The callback can sleep. 3677 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 3678 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 3679 * The callback must be atomic. 3680 * 3681 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 3682 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 3683 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 3684 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 3685 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 3686 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 3687 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 3688 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 3689 * more-data bit must always be set. 3690 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 3691 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 3692 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 3693 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 3694 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3695 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 3696 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 3697 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 3698 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 3699 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 3700 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 3701 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 3702 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 3703 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 3704 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 3705 * This callback must be atomic. 3706 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 3707 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 3708 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 3709 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 3710 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 3711 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 3712 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3713 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 3714 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 3715 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 3716 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 3717 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 3718 * This callback must be atomic. 3719 * 3720 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 3721 * 3722 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 3723 * 3724 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 3725 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 3726 * 3727 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 3728 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 3729 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 3730 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 3731 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 3732 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 3733 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the 3734 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response 3735 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO. 3736 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211 3737 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication 3738 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO. 3739 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 3740 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 3741 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the 3742 * duration for which the operation is requested. 3743 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 3744 * 3745 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 3746 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 3747 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 3748 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 3749 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 3750 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 3751 * 2 * (DTIM period). 3752 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 3753 * 3754 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 3755 * This callback may sleep. 3756 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 3757 * This callback may sleep. 3758 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 3759 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 3760 * channel context with different settings 3761 * This callback may sleep. 3762 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 3763 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 3764 * This callback may sleep. 3765 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 3766 * unbound from vif. 3767 * This callback may sleep. 3768 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 3769 * another, as specified in the list of 3770 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 3771 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 3772 * This callback may sleep. 3773 * 3774 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 3775 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 3776 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 3777 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 3778 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 3779 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 3780 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 3781 * 3782 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 3783 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 3784 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 3785 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 3786 * This callback may sleep. 3787 * 3788 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 3789 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 3790 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 3791 * 3792 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 3793 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 3794 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 3795 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 3796 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 3797 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 3798 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 3799 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 3800 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 3801 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 3802 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3803 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 3804 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 3805 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 3806 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3807 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 3808 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3809 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3810 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the 3811 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3812 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 3813 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 3814 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 3815 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 3816 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 3817 * channel context is bound before this is called. 3818 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 3819 * 3820 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 3821 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 3822 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 3823 * 3824 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 3825 * and hardware limits. 3826 * 3827 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 3828 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 3829 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 3830 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 3831 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 3832 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 3833 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 3834 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 3835 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 3836 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 3837 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 3838 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 3839 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 3840 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 3841 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 3842 * the function call. 3843 * 3844 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 3845 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 3846 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 3847 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 3848 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 3849 * 3850 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 3851 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 3852 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 3853 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 3854 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 3855 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 3856 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 3857 * changed parameters. 3858 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 3859 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 3860 * this call. 3861 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 3862 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 3863 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 3864 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 3865 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 3866 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 3867 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 3868 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 3869 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 3870 * 3871 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 3872 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 3873 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 3874 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 3875 * This callback may sleep. 3876 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 3877 * This callback may sleep. 3878 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 3879 * 4-address mode 3880 */ 3881 struct ieee80211_ops { 3882 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3883 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 3884 struct sk_buff *skb); 3885 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3886 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3887 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 3888 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 3889 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3890 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 3891 #endif 3892 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3893 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3894 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3895 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3896 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 3897 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3898 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3899 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 3900 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3901 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3902 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 3903 u32 changed); 3904 3905 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3906 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3907 3908 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3909 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 3910 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3911 unsigned int changed_flags, 3912 unsigned int *total_flags, 3913 u64 multicast); 3914 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3915 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3916 unsigned int filter_flags, 3917 unsigned int changed_flags); 3918 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3919 bool set); 3920 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 3921 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3922 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 3923 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3924 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3925 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 3926 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3927 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 3928 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3929 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3930 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 3931 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3932 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 3933 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3934 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 3935 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3936 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3937 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3938 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3939 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 3940 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 3941 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3942 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3943 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3944 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3945 const u8 *mac_addr); 3946 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3947 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3948 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3949 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 3950 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3951 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 3952 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 3953 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 3954 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 3955 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3956 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3957 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3958 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3959 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 3960 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3961 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3962 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3963 struct dentry *dir); 3964 #endif 3965 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3966 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3967 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3968 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3969 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3970 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3971 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3972 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 3973 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 3974 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3975 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3976 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3977 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3978 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3979 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3980 u32 changed); 3981 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3982 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3983 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3984 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3985 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3986 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3987 struct station_info *sinfo); 3988 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3989 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac, 3990 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 3991 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3992 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3993 u64 tsf); 3994 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3995 s64 offset); 3996 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3997 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3998 3999 /** 4000 * @ampdu_action: 4001 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4002 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4003 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4004 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4005 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4006 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4007 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4008 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4009 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4010 * 4011 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4012 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4013 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4014 * 4015 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4016 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4017 * 4018 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4019 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4020 * - ``TX: 81`` 4021 * 4022 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4023 * 4024 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4025 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4026 * if the session can start immediately. 4027 * 4028 * The callback can sleep. 4029 */ 4030 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4031 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4032 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4033 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4034 struct survey_info *survey); 4035 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4036 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4037 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4038 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4039 void *data, int len); 4040 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4041 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4042 void *data, int len); 4043 #endif 4044 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4045 u32 queues, bool drop); 4046 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4047 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4048 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4049 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4050 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4051 4052 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4053 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4054 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4055 int duration, 4056 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4057 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4058 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4059 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4060 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4061 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4062 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4063 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4064 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4065 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4066 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4067 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4068 4069 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4070 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4071 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4072 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4073 bool more_data); 4074 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4075 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4076 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4077 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4078 bool more_data); 4079 4080 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4081 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4082 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4083 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4084 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4085 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4086 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4087 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4088 4089 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4090 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4091 u16 duration); 4092 4093 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4094 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4095 4096 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4097 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4098 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4099 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4100 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4101 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4102 u32 changed); 4103 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4104 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4105 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4106 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4107 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4108 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4109 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4110 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4111 int n_vifs, 4112 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4113 4114 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4115 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4116 4117 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4118 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4119 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4120 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4121 #endif 4122 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4123 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4124 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4125 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4126 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4127 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4128 4129 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4130 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4131 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4132 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4133 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4134 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4135 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4136 4137 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4138 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4139 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4140 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4141 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4142 int *dbm); 4143 4144 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4145 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4146 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4147 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4148 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4149 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4150 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4151 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4152 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4153 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4154 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4155 4156 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4157 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4158 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4159 4160 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4161 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4162 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4163 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4164 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4165 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4166 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4167 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4168 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4169 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4170 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4171 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4172 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4173 u8 instance_id); 4174 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4175 struct sk_buff *head, 4176 struct sk_buff *skb); 4177 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4179 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4180 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4181 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4182 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4183 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4184 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4185 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4186 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4187 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4188 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4189 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4190 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4191 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4192 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4193 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4194 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4195 }; 4196 4197 /** 4198 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4199 * 4200 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4201 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4202 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4203 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4204 * @priv_data_len. 4205 * 4206 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4207 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4208 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4209 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4210 * 4211 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4212 */ 4213 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4214 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4215 const char *requested_name); 4216 4217 /** 4218 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4219 * 4220 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4221 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4222 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4223 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4224 * @priv_data_len. 4225 * 4226 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4227 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4228 * 4229 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4230 */ 4231 static inline 4232 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4233 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4234 { 4235 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4236 } 4237 4238 /** 4239 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4240 * 4241 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4242 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4243 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4244 * 4245 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4246 * 4247 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4248 */ 4249 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4250 4251 /** 4252 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4253 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4254 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4255 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4256 */ 4257 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4258 int throughput; 4259 int blink_time; 4260 }; 4261 4262 /** 4263 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4264 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4265 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4266 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4267 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4268 */ 4269 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4270 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4271 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4272 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4273 }; 4274 4275 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4276 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4277 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4278 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4279 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4280 const char * 4281 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4282 unsigned int flags, 4283 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4284 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4285 #endif 4286 /** 4287 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4288 * 4289 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4290 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4291 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4292 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4293 * 4294 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4295 * 4296 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4297 */ 4298 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4299 { 4300 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4301 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4302 #else 4303 return NULL; 4304 #endif 4305 } 4306 4307 /** 4308 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4309 * 4310 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4311 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4312 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4313 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4314 * 4315 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4316 * 4317 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4318 */ 4319 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4320 { 4321 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4322 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4323 #else 4324 return NULL; 4325 #endif 4326 } 4327 4328 /** 4329 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4330 * 4331 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4332 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4333 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4334 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4335 * 4336 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4337 * 4338 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4339 */ 4340 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4341 { 4342 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4343 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 4344 #else 4345 return NULL; 4346 #endif 4347 } 4348 4349 /** 4350 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 4351 * 4352 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4353 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4354 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4355 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4356 * 4357 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4358 * 4359 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4360 */ 4361 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4362 { 4363 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4364 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 4365 #else 4366 return NULL; 4367 #endif 4368 } 4369 4370 /** 4371 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 4372 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 4373 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 4374 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 4375 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 4376 * 4377 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 4378 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 4379 * 4380 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 4381 */ 4382 static inline const char * 4383 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 4384 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4385 unsigned int blink_table_len) 4386 { 4387 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4388 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 4389 blink_table_len); 4390 #else 4391 return NULL; 4392 #endif 4393 } 4394 4395 /** 4396 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 4397 * 4398 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 4399 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 4400 * 4401 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 4402 */ 4403 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4404 4405 /** 4406 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 4407 * 4408 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 4409 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 4410 * before calling this function. 4411 * 4412 * @hw: the hardware to free 4413 */ 4414 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4415 4416 /** 4417 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 4418 * 4419 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 4420 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 4421 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 4422 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 4423 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 4424 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 4425 * 4426 * @hw: the hardware to restart 4427 */ 4428 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4429 4430 /** 4431 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 4432 * 4433 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4434 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4435 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4436 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4437 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4438 * 4439 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4440 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4441 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4442 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4443 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4444 * 4445 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 4446 * 4447 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4448 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4449 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4450 * @list: the destination list 4451 */ 4452 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4453 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 4454 4455 /** 4456 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 4457 * 4458 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4459 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4460 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4461 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4462 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4463 * 4464 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4465 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4466 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4467 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4468 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4469 * 4470 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 4471 * 4472 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4473 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4474 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4475 * @napi: the NAPI context 4476 */ 4477 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4478 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 4479 4480 /** 4481 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 4482 * 4483 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4484 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4485 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4486 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4487 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4488 * 4489 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4490 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4491 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4492 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4493 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4494 * 4495 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4496 * 4497 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4498 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4499 */ 4500 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 4501 { 4502 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 4503 } 4504 4505 /** 4506 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 4507 * 4508 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 4509 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4510 * 4511 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 4512 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 4513 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4514 * 4515 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4516 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4517 */ 4518 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 4519 4520 /** 4521 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 4522 * 4523 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 4524 * (internally disables bottom halves). 4525 * 4526 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 4527 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4528 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4529 * 4530 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4531 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4532 */ 4533 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4534 struct sk_buff *skb) 4535 { 4536 local_bh_disable(); 4537 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 4538 local_bh_enable(); 4539 } 4540 4541 /** 4542 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 4543 * 4544 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 4545 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 4546 * entering/leaving PS mode. 4547 * 4548 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 4549 * 4550 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 4551 * each other. 4552 * 4553 * @sta: currently connected sta 4554 * @start: start or stop PS 4555 * 4556 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 4557 */ 4558 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 4559 4560 /** 4561 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 4562 * (in process context) 4563 * 4564 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 4565 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 4566 * applies. 4567 * 4568 * @sta: currently connected sta 4569 * @start: start or stop PS 4570 * 4571 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 4572 */ 4573 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4574 bool start) 4575 { 4576 int ret; 4577 4578 local_bh_disable(); 4579 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 4580 local_bh_enable(); 4581 4582 return ret; 4583 } 4584 4585 /** 4586 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 4587 * @sta: currently connected station 4588 * 4589 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4590 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 4591 * connected station was received. 4592 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4593 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 4594 * be serialized. 4595 */ 4596 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4597 4598 /** 4599 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 4600 * @sta: currently connected station 4601 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 4602 * 4603 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4604 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 4605 * from a connected station was received. 4606 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4607 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 4608 * serialized. 4609 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 4610 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 4611 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 4612 * checks. 4613 */ 4614 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 4615 4616 /* 4617 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 4618 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 4619 */ 4620 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 4621 4622 /** 4623 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 4624 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 4625 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 4626 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 4627 * 4628 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 4629 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 4630 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 4631 * 4632 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 4633 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 4634 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 4635 * call! Beware of the locking!) 4636 * 4637 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 4638 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 4639 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 4640 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 4641 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 4642 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 4643 * 4644 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 4645 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 4646 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 4647 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 4648 * use this API. 4649 */ 4650 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4651 u8 tid, bool buffered); 4652 4653 /** 4654 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 4655 * 4656 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 4657 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 4658 * rate selection table for the station entry. 4659 * 4660 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4661 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 4662 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 4663 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 4664 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 4665 */ 4666 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4667 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4668 struct sk_buff *skb, 4669 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 4670 int max_rates); 4671 4672 /** 4673 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 4674 * 4675 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 4676 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 4677 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 4678 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 4679 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 4680 * slow stations to starve). 4681 * 4682 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 4683 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 4684 */ 4685 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4686 u32 thr); 4687 4688 /** 4689 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 4690 * 4691 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 4692 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 4693 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 4694 * 4695 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4696 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 4697 * @info: tx status information 4698 */ 4699 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4700 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4701 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 4702 4703 /** 4704 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback 4705 * 4706 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 4707 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 4708 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 4709 * 4710 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4711 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 4712 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 4713 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4714 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4715 * 4716 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4717 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4718 */ 4719 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4720 struct sk_buff *skb); 4721 4722 /** 4723 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 4724 * 4725 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4726 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 4727 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 4728 * 4729 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4730 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4731 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4732 * 4733 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4734 * @status: tx status information 4735 */ 4736 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4737 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 4738 4739 /** 4740 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 4741 * 4742 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4743 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 4744 * specific skbs. 4745 * 4746 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4747 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4748 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4749 * 4750 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4751 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 4752 * (NULL for multicast packets) 4753 * @info: tx status information 4754 */ 4755 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4756 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4757 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 4758 { 4759 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 4760 .sta = sta, 4761 .info = info, 4762 }; 4763 4764 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 4765 } 4766 4767 /** 4768 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 4769 * 4770 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context. 4771 * 4772 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4773 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 4774 * for a single hardware. 4775 * 4776 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4777 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4778 */ 4779 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4780 struct sk_buff *skb) 4781 { 4782 local_bh_disable(); 4783 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb); 4784 local_bh_enable(); 4785 } 4786 4787 /** 4788 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 4789 * 4790 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context 4791 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4792 * 4793 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4794 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4795 * 4796 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4797 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4798 */ 4799 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4800 struct sk_buff *skb); 4801 4802 /** 4803 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format 4804 * 4805 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit 4806 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which 4807 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap 4808 * 802.11 frames. 4809 * 4810 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4811 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all 4812 * calls in the same tx status family. 4813 * 4814 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4815 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted 4816 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4817 */ 4818 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4819 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4820 struct sk_buff *skb); 4821 4822 /** 4823 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 4824 * 4825 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 4826 * connected STA. 4827 * 4828 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 4829 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 4830 */ 4831 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 4832 4833 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 4834 4835 /** 4836 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 4837 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 4838 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 4839 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 4840 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 4841 * should be ignored. 4842 */ 4843 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 4844 u16 tim_offset; 4845 u16 tim_length; 4846 4847 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 4848 }; 4849 4850 /** 4851 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 4852 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4853 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4854 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 4855 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 4856 * 4857 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 4858 * obtain the beacon template. 4859 * 4860 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 4861 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 4862 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 4863 * applicable, the CSA count. 4864 * 4865 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 4866 * 4867 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 4868 */ 4869 struct sk_buff * 4870 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4871 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4872 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs); 4873 4874 /** 4875 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 4876 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4877 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4878 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 4879 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 4880 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 4881 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 4882 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 4883 * 4884 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 4885 * obtain the beacon frame. 4886 * 4887 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 4888 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 4889 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 4890 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 4891 * 4892 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 4893 * 4894 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 4895 */ 4896 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4897 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4898 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length); 4899 4900 /** 4901 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 4902 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4903 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4904 * 4905 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 4906 * 4907 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 4908 */ 4909 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4910 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 4911 { 4912 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL); 4913 } 4914 4915 /** 4916 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 4917 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4918 * 4919 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 4920 * This function is called implicitly when 4921 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 4922 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 4923 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 4924 * 4925 * Return: new countdown value 4926 */ 4927 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4928 4929 /** 4930 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 4931 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4932 * @counter: the new value for the counter 4933 * 4934 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 4935 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 4936 * 4937 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 4938 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 4939 */ 4940 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 4941 4942 /** 4943 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 4944 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4945 * 4946 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 4947 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 4948 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 4949 */ 4950 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4951 4952 /** 4953 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 4954 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4955 * 4956 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero. 4957 */ 4958 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4959 4960 /** 4961 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 4962 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4963 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4964 * 4965 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 4966 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 4967 * 4968 * Can only be called in AP mode. 4969 * 4970 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 4971 */ 4972 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4973 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4974 4975 /** 4976 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 4977 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4978 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4979 * 4980 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 4981 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 4982 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 4983 * 4984 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 4985 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 4986 * 4987 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 4988 */ 4989 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4990 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4991 4992 /** 4993 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 4994 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4995 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4996 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 4997 * if at all possible 4998 * 4999 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5000 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5001 * BSSID and address is used. 5002 * 5003 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5004 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5005 * 5006 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5007 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5008 * 5009 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5010 */ 5011 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5012 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5013 bool qos_ok); 5014 5015 /** 5016 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5017 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5018 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5019 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5020 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5021 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5022 * 5023 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5024 * hardware. 5025 * 5026 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5027 */ 5028 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5029 const u8 *src_addr, 5030 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5031 size_t tailroom); 5032 5033 /** 5034 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5035 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5036 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5037 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5038 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5039 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5040 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5041 * 5042 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5043 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5044 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5045 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5046 */ 5047 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5048 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5049 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5050 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5051 5052 /** 5053 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5054 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5055 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5056 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5057 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5058 * 5059 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5060 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5061 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5062 * 5063 * Return: The duration. 5064 */ 5065 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5066 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5067 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5068 5069 /** 5070 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5071 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5072 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5073 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5074 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5075 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5076 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5077 * 5078 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5079 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5080 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5081 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5082 */ 5083 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5084 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5085 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5086 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5087 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5088 5089 /** 5090 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5091 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5092 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5093 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5094 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5095 * 5096 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5097 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5098 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5099 * 5100 * Return: The duration. 5101 */ 5102 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5103 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5104 size_t frame_len, 5105 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5106 5107 /** 5108 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5109 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5110 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5111 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5112 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5113 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5114 * 5115 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5116 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5117 * 5118 * Return: The duration. 5119 */ 5120 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5121 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5122 enum nl80211_band band, 5123 size_t frame_len, 5124 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5125 5126 /** 5127 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5128 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5129 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5130 * 5131 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5132 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5133 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5134 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5135 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5136 * 5137 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5138 * frames are available. 5139 * 5140 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5141 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5142 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5143 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5144 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5145 * use common code for all beacons. 5146 */ 5147 struct sk_buff * 5148 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5149 5150 /** 5151 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5152 * 5153 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5154 * 5155 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5156 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5157 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5158 */ 5159 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5160 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5161 5162 /** 5163 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5164 * 5165 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5166 * from the given packet. 5167 * 5168 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5169 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5170 * with this P1K 5171 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5172 */ 5173 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5174 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5175 { 5176 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5177 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5178 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5179 5180 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5181 } 5182 5183 /** 5184 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5185 * 5186 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5187 * and transmitter address. 5188 * 5189 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5190 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5191 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5192 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5193 */ 5194 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5195 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5196 5197 /** 5198 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5199 * 5200 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5201 * in the packet. 5202 * 5203 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5204 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5205 * encrypted with this key 5206 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5207 */ 5208 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5209 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5210 5211 /** 5212 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5213 * 5214 * @pos: start of crypto header 5215 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5216 * @pn: PN to add 5217 * 5218 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5219 * the packet payload) 5220 * 5221 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5222 * point to the crypto header) 5223 */ 5224 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5225 5226 /** 5227 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5228 * 5229 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5230 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5231 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5232 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5233 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5234 * 5235 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5236 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5237 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5238 * 5239 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5240 * can be done concurrently. 5241 */ 5242 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5243 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5244 5245 /** 5246 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5247 * 5248 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5249 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5250 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5251 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5252 * @seq: new sequence data 5253 * 5254 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5255 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5256 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5257 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 5258 * 5259 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5260 * can be done concurrently. 5261 */ 5262 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5263 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5264 5265 /** 5266 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 5267 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5268 * 5269 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 5270 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 5271 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 5272 * 5273 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently) 5274 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().) 5275 */ 5276 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5277 5278 /** 5279 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 5280 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 5281 * @keyconf: new key data 5282 * 5283 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 5284 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 5285 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 5286 * 5287 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will 5288 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 5289 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 5290 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 5291 * 5292 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 5293 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 5294 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 5295 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 5296 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 5297 * of the reconfiguration. 5298 * 5299 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 5300 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 5301 * 5302 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 5303 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 5304 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 5305 * the key that's being replaced. 5306 */ 5307 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 5308 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5309 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5310 5311 /** 5312 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 5313 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 5314 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 5315 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 5316 * @gfp: allocation flags 5317 */ 5318 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 5319 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 5320 5321 /** 5322 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 5323 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5324 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5325 * 5326 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5327 */ 5328 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5329 5330 /** 5331 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 5332 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5333 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5334 * 5335 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5336 */ 5337 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5338 5339 /** 5340 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 5341 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5342 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5343 * 5344 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5345 * 5346 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 5347 */ 5348 5349 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5350 5351 /** 5352 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 5353 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5354 * 5355 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5356 */ 5357 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5358 5359 /** 5360 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 5361 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5362 * 5363 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5364 */ 5365 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5366 5367 /** 5368 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 5369 * 5370 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 5371 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 5372 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 5373 * any context, including hardirq context. 5374 * 5375 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 5376 * @info: information about the completed scan 5377 */ 5378 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5379 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 5380 5381 /** 5382 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 5383 * 5384 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 5385 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 5386 * 5387 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5388 */ 5389 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5390 5391 /** 5392 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 5393 * 5394 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 5395 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 5396 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 5397 * while associating, for instance. 5398 * 5399 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5400 */ 5401 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5402 5403 /** 5404 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 5405 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 5406 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 5407 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 5408 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 5409 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5410 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 5411 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5412 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 5413 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 5414 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 5415 * for instance. 5416 */ 5417 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 5418 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 5419 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 5420 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 5421 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 5422 }; 5423 5424 /** 5425 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 5426 * 5427 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5428 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 5429 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 5430 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5431 * 5432 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5433 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5434 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5435 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5436 */ 5437 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5438 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5439 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5440 void *data); 5441 5442 /** 5443 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 5444 * 5445 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5446 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5447 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5448 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 5449 * be used. 5450 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5451 * 5452 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5453 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5454 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5455 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5456 */ 5457 static inline void 5458 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5459 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5460 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5461 void *data) 5462 { 5463 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 5464 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 5465 iterator, data); 5466 } 5467 5468 /** 5469 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 5470 * 5471 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5472 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5473 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5474 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 5475 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5476 * 5477 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5478 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5479 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5480 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5481 */ 5482 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5483 u32 iter_flags, 5484 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5485 u8 *mac, 5486 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5487 void *data); 5488 5489 /** 5490 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces 5491 * 5492 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5493 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5494 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL. 5495 * 5496 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5497 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5498 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5499 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5500 */ 5501 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5502 u32 iter_flags, 5503 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5504 u8 *mac, 5505 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5506 void *data); 5507 5508 /** 5509 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 5510 * 5511 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5512 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5513 * function for them. 5514 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5515 * 5516 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5517 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5518 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5519 */ 5520 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5521 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5522 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5523 void *data); 5524 /** 5525 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5526 * 5527 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 5528 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 5529 * 5530 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5531 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 5532 */ 5533 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 5534 5535 /** 5536 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5537 * 5538 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 5539 * workqueue. 5540 * 5541 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5542 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 5543 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 5544 */ 5545 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5546 struct delayed_work *dwork, 5547 unsigned long delay); 5548 5549 /** 5550 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 5551 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 5552 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5553 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 5554 * 5555 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 5556 * 5557 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5558 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5559 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5560 */ 5561 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 5562 u16 timeout); 5563 5564 /** 5565 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 5566 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5567 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5568 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5569 * 5570 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5571 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 5572 * from any context. 5573 */ 5574 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5575 u16 tid); 5576 5577 /** 5578 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 5579 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 5580 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 5581 * 5582 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 5583 * 5584 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5585 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5586 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5587 */ 5588 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 5589 5590 /** 5591 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 5592 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5593 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5594 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 5595 * 5596 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5597 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 5598 * can be called from any context. 5599 */ 5600 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5601 u16 tid); 5602 5603 /** 5604 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 5605 * 5606 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 5607 * @addr: station's address 5608 * 5609 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5610 * 5611 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5612 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5613 */ 5614 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5615 const u8 *addr); 5616 5617 /** 5618 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 5619 * 5620 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5621 * @addr: remote station's address 5622 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 5623 * 5624 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5625 * 5626 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5627 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5628 * 5629 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 5630 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 5631 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 5632 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 5633 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 5634 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 5635 * is not reliable. 5636 * 5637 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 5638 */ 5639 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5640 const u8 *addr, 5641 const u8 *localaddr); 5642 5643 /** 5644 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 5645 * @hw: the hardware 5646 * @pubsta: the station 5647 * @block: whether to block or unblock 5648 * 5649 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 5650 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 5651 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 5652 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 5653 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 5654 * 5655 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 5656 * manner. 5657 * 5658 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 5659 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 5660 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 5661 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 5662 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 5663 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 5664 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 5665 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 5666 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 5667 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 5668 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 5669 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 5670 * woke up while blocked or not. 5671 */ 5672 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5673 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 5674 5675 /** 5676 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 5677 * @pubsta: the station 5678 * 5679 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 5680 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 5681 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 5682 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 5683 * 5684 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 5685 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 5686 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 5687 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 5688 * 5689 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 5690 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 5691 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 5692 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 5693 */ 5694 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 5695 5696 /** 5697 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 5698 * @pubsta: the station 5699 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 5700 * 5701 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 5702 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 5703 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 5704 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 5705 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 5706 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 5707 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 5708 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 5709 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 5710 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 5711 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 5712 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 5713 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 5714 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 5715 */ 5716 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 5717 5718 /** 5719 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 5720 * 5721 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 5722 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 5723 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 5724 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 5725 * 5726 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 5727 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 5728 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 5729 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 5730 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 5731 * attempts. 5732 * 5733 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 5734 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 5735 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 5736 * them to 0. 5737 * 5738 * @pubsta: the station 5739 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 5740 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 5741 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 5742 */ 5743 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 5744 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 5745 5746 /** 5747 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 5748 * 5749 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5750 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 5751 * 5752 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 5753 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false. 5754 */ 5755 bool 5756 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 5757 5758 /** 5759 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 5760 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5761 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 5762 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 5763 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 5764 * 5765 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 5766 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 5767 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 5768 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due 5769 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few 5770 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep. 5771 * 5772 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 5773 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 5774 * set_key callback. 5775 */ 5776 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5777 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5778 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5779 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5780 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5781 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 5782 void *data), 5783 void *iter_data); 5784 5785 /** 5786 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 5787 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5788 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 5789 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 5790 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 5791 * 5792 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 5793 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 5794 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 5795 * in removal process will be skipped. 5796 * 5797 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 5798 * and thus iter must be atomic. 5799 */ 5800 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5801 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5802 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5803 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5804 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5805 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 5806 void *data), 5807 void *iter_data); 5808 5809 /** 5810 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 5811 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5812 * @iter: iterator function 5813 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 5814 * 5815 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 5816 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 5817 * places while calling into the driver. 5818 * 5819 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 5820 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 5821 * removed. 5822 * 5823 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 5824 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 5825 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 5826 * or not. 5827 */ 5828 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 5829 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5830 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5831 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 5832 void *data), 5833 void *iter_data); 5834 5835 /** 5836 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5837 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5838 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5839 * 5840 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5841 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 5842 * information. This function must only be called from within the 5843 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 5844 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 5845 * %NULL. 5846 * 5847 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5848 */ 5849 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5850 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5851 5852 /** 5853 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 5854 * 5855 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5856 * 5857 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 5858 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 5859 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 5860 */ 5861 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5862 5863 /** 5864 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 5865 * 5866 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5867 * 5868 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 5869 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 5870 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 5871 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 5872 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 5873 * 5874 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 5875 * without connection recovery attempts. 5876 */ 5877 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5878 5879 /** 5880 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 5881 * 5882 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5883 * 5884 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 5885 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 5886 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 5887 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 5888 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 5889 * 5890 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 5891 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 5892 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 5893 * disconnect normally later. 5894 * 5895 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 5896 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 5897 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 5898 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 5899 */ 5900 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5901 5902 /** 5903 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 5904 * rssi threshold triggered 5905 * 5906 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5907 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 5908 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 5909 * @gfp: context flags 5910 * 5911 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 5912 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 5913 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 5914 */ 5915 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5916 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 5917 s32 rssi_level, 5918 gfp_t gfp); 5919 5920 /** 5921 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 5922 * 5923 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5924 * @gfp: context flags 5925 */ 5926 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 5927 5928 /** 5929 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 5930 * 5931 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5932 */ 5933 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5934 5935 /** 5936 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 5937 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5938 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 5939 * 5940 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 5941 * and wake up the suspended queues. 5942 */ 5943 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success); 5944 5945 /** 5946 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 5947 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5948 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 5949 * 5950 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 5951 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 5952 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 5953 */ 5954 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5955 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 5956 5957 /** 5958 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 5959 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5960 */ 5961 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5962 5963 /** 5964 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 5965 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5966 */ 5967 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5968 5969 /** 5970 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 5971 * 5972 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 5973 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 5974 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 5975 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 5976 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 5977 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 5978 * 5979 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5980 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 5981 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 5982 */ 5983 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 5984 const u8 *addr); 5985 5986 /** 5987 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 5988 * @pubsta: station struct 5989 * @tid: the session's TID 5990 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 5991 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 5992 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 5993 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 5994 * 5995 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 5996 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 5997 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 5998 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 5999 */ 6000 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6001 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 6002 u16 received_mpdus); 6003 6004 /** 6005 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6006 * 6007 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6008 * buffer. 6009 * 6010 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6011 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6012 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6013 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6014 */ 6015 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6016 6017 /** 6018 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6019 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6020 * @addr: station mac address 6021 * @tid: the rx tid 6022 */ 6023 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6024 unsigned int tid); 6025 6026 /** 6027 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6028 * 6029 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6030 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6031 * reordering. 6032 * 6033 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6034 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6035 * 6036 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6037 * @addr: station mac address 6038 * @tid: the rx tid 6039 */ 6040 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6041 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6042 { 6043 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6044 return; 6045 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6046 } 6047 6048 /** 6049 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6050 * 6051 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6052 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6053 * reordering. 6054 * 6055 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6056 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6057 * 6058 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6059 * @addr: station mac address 6060 * @tid: the rx tid 6061 */ 6062 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6063 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6064 { 6065 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6066 return; 6067 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6068 } 6069 6070 /** 6071 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6072 * 6073 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6074 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6075 * 6076 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6077 * 6078 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6079 * @addr: station mac address 6080 * @tid: the rx tid 6081 */ 6082 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6083 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6084 6085 /* Rate control API */ 6086 6087 /** 6088 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6089 * 6090 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6091 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6092 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6093 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6094 * to be filled in 6095 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6096 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6097 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6098 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6099 * RTS threshold 6100 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6101 * if the selected rate supports it 6102 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6103 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6104 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6105 */ 6106 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6107 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6108 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6109 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6110 struct sk_buff *skb; 6111 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6112 bool rts, short_preamble; 6113 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6114 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6115 bool bss; 6116 }; 6117 6118 /** 6119 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6120 */ 6121 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6122 /** 6123 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6124 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6125 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6126 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6127 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6128 */ 6129 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6130 }; 6131 6132 struct rate_control_ops { 6133 unsigned long capa; 6134 const char *name; 6135 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6136 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 6137 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 6138 void (*free)(void *priv); 6139 6140 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 6141 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6142 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6143 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 6144 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6145 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6146 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6147 u32 changed); 6148 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6149 void *priv_sta); 6150 6151 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 6152 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6153 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 6154 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6155 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6156 struct sk_buff *skb); 6157 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6158 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 6159 6160 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 6161 struct dentry *dir); 6162 6163 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 6164 }; 6165 6166 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6167 enum nl80211_band band, 6168 int index) 6169 { 6170 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 6171 } 6172 6173 static inline s8 6174 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6175 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6176 { 6177 int i; 6178 6179 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6180 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6181 return i; 6182 6183 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 6184 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 6185 6186 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 6187 return 0; 6188 } 6189 6190 static inline 6191 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6192 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6193 { 6194 unsigned int i; 6195 6196 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6197 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6198 return true; 6199 return false; 6200 } 6201 6202 /** 6203 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 6204 * 6205 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 6206 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 6207 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 6208 * the most recent rate control module decision. 6209 * 6210 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6211 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 6212 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 6213 */ 6214 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6215 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 6216 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 6217 6218 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6219 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6220 6221 static inline bool 6222 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6223 { 6224 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 6225 } 6226 6227 static inline bool 6228 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6229 { 6230 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6231 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6232 } 6233 6234 static inline bool 6235 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6236 { 6237 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6238 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6239 } 6240 6241 static inline bool 6242 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6243 { 6244 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 6245 } 6246 6247 static inline bool 6248 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6249 { 6250 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 6251 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 6252 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 6253 } 6254 6255 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6256 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 6257 { 6258 if (p2p) { 6259 switch (type) { 6260 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 6261 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 6262 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 6263 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 6264 default: 6265 break; 6266 } 6267 } 6268 return type; 6269 } 6270 6271 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6272 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6273 { 6274 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 6275 } 6276 6277 /** 6278 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 6279 * 6280 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6281 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 6282 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 6283 * 6284 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 6285 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 6286 * matching GroupId management frame. 6287 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 6288 */ 6289 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6290 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 6291 6292 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6293 int rssi_min_thold, 6294 int rssi_max_thold); 6295 6296 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6297 6298 /** 6299 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 6300 * 6301 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6302 * 6303 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 6304 * 6305 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 6306 * applicable. 6307 */ 6308 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6309 6310 /** 6311 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 6312 * @vif: virtual interface 6313 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 6314 * @gfp: allocation flags 6315 * 6316 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 6317 */ 6318 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6319 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 6320 gfp_t gfp); 6321 6322 /** 6323 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 6324 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6325 * @vif: virtual interface 6326 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 6327 * @band: the band to transmit on 6328 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 6329 * 6330 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 6331 */ 6332 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6333 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 6334 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 6335 6336 /** 6337 * Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header of injected frames 6338 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 6339 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 6340 */ 6341 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 6342 struct net_device *dev); 6343 6344 /** 6345 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 6346 * 6347 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 6348 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 6349 * 6350 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 6351 * 6352 * private: 6353 * 6354 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 6355 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 6356 */ 6357 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 6358 u32 next_tsf; 6359 bool has_next_tsf; 6360 6361 u8 absent; 6362 6363 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6364 struct { 6365 u32 start; 6366 u32 duration; 6367 u32 interval; 6368 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6369 }; 6370 6371 /** 6372 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 6373 * 6374 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 6375 * @data: NoA tracking data 6376 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6377 * 6378 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 6379 */ 6380 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 6381 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6382 6383 /** 6384 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 6385 * 6386 * @data: NoA tracking data 6387 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6388 */ 6389 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6390 6391 /** 6392 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 6393 * @vif: virtual interface 6394 * @peer: the peer's destination address 6395 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 6396 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 6397 * @gfp: allocation flags 6398 * 6399 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 6400 */ 6401 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 6402 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 6403 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 6404 6405 /** 6406 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 6407 * 6408 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 6409 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 6410 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 6411 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 6412 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 6413 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 6414 * 6415 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 6416 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 6417 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6418 * 6419 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 6420 * @tid: the TID to reserve 6421 * 6422 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 6423 */ 6424 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6425 6426 /** 6427 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 6428 * 6429 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 6430 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 6431 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 6432 * 6433 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 6434 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 6435 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6436 * 6437 * @sta: the station 6438 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 6439 */ 6440 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6441 6442 /** 6443 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6444 * 6445 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6446 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6447 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6448 * 6449 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 6450 * 6451 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 6452 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 6453 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 6454 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 6455 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 6456 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 6457 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 6458 * 6459 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 6460 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 6461 */ 6462 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6463 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6464 6465 /** 6466 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6467 * (in process context) 6468 * 6469 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 6470 * (internally disables bottom halves). 6471 * 6472 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6473 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6474 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6475 */ 6476 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6477 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6478 { 6479 struct sk_buff *skb; 6480 6481 local_bh_disable(); 6482 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 6483 local_bh_enable(); 6484 6485 return skb; 6486 } 6487 6488 /** 6489 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 6490 * 6491 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6492 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 6493 * 6494 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 6495 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 6496 * driver has finished scheduling it. 6497 */ 6498 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6499 6500 /** 6501 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 6502 * 6503 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6504 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 6505 * 6506 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 6507 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 6508 */ 6509 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6510 6511 /* (deprecated) */ 6512 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 6513 { 6514 } 6515 6516 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6517 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 6518 6519 /** 6520 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 6521 * 6522 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6523 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6524 * 6525 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 6526 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 6527 * 6528 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 6529 * this TXQ internally. 6530 */ 6531 static inline void 6532 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6533 { 6534 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 6535 } 6536 6537 /** 6538 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 6539 * 6540 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6541 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6542 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 6543 * 6544 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 6545 * internally. 6546 */ 6547 static inline void 6548 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6549 bool force) 6550 { 6551 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 6552 } 6553 6554 /** 6555 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 6556 * 6557 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 6558 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 6559 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by 6560 * next_txq(). 6561 * 6562 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 6563 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 6564 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 6565 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 6566 * again. 6567 * 6568 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 6569 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 6570 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 6571 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 6572 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 6573 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 6574 * 6575 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6576 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6577 */ 6578 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6579 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6580 6581 /** 6582 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 6583 * 6584 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 6585 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 6586 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 6587 * 6588 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6589 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 6590 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 6591 */ 6592 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6593 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 6594 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 6595 6596 /** 6597 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 6598 * 6599 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 6600 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6601 * 6602 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6603 * @inst_id: the local instance id 6604 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 6605 * @gfp: allocation flags 6606 */ 6607 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6608 u8 inst_id, 6609 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 6610 gfp_t gfp); 6611 6612 /** 6613 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 6614 * 6615 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 6616 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 6617 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6618 * 6619 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6620 * @match: match event information 6621 * @gfp: allocation flags 6622 */ 6623 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6624 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 6625 gfp_t gfp); 6626 6627 /** 6628 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 6629 * 6630 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6631 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 6632 * 6633 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6634 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 6635 * information. 6636 * @len: frame length in bytes 6637 */ 6638 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6639 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 6640 int len); 6641 6642 /** 6643 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 6644 * 6645 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6646 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 6647 * 6648 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6649 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6650 * @len: frame length in bytes 6651 */ 6652 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6653 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 6654 int len); 6655 /** 6656 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading. 6657 * 6658 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3 6659 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the 6660 * hardware or firmware. 6661 * 6662 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6663 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off 6664 */ 6665 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable); 6666 6667 /** 6668 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 6669 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6670 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6671 * 6672 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 6673 * 6674 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 6675 */ 6676 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6677 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6678 6679 /** 6680 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 6681 * probe response template. 6682 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6683 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6684 * 6685 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 6686 * 6687 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 6688 */ 6689 struct sk_buff * 6690 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6691 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6692 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 6693